annotate etc/NEWS @ 28037:acbd35afbe7b

*** empty log message ***
author Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
date Tue, 07 Mar 2000 14:21:40 +0000
parents 82c488f26a07
children c60fdd764b01
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3 See the end for copying conditions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
8
25995
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
10
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
11 ** There are two new resources for colormap handling under X.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
12
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
13 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
14 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
15 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
16 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
17 visual class names are
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
18
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
19 TrueColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
20 PseudoColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
21 DirectColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
22 StaticColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
23 GrayScale
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
24 StaticGray
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
25
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
26 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
27 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
28 meaning.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
29
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
30 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
31 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
32 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
33 visual.
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
34
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
35 Example:
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
36
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
37 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
38
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
39 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
40 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
41 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
42 resource values are `true' or `on'.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
43
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
44 Example:
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
45
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
46 emacs.privateColormap: true
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
47
25995
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
48 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
49 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
27714
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
50
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
51 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
52 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
25995
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
53
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
54 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
55
27966
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
56 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
57 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
58 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
59
27847
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
60 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
27845
995881918154 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27827
diff changeset
61 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
27847
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
62 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
63 be customized.
27845
995881918154 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27827
diff changeset
64
27770
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
65 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
66
27473
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
67 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
68 all frames except the selected one.
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
69
27369
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
70 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
71 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
72
27356
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
73 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
74 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
75 area or with tooltips.
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
76
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
77 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
78 read mail from the menu etc.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
79
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
80 ** Changes in Outline mode.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
81
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
82 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
83 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
84 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
85
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
86 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
87 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
88
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
89 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
90 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
91 several other special buffers.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
92
26432
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
93 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
94 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
95 .emacs file.
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
96
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
97 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
98 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
99
26417
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
100 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
101 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
102 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
103
26322
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
104 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
105 is running in batch mode. For example,
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
106
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
107 (message "%s" (read t))
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
108
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
109 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
110 to standard output.
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
111
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
112 ** Faces and frame parameters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
114 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
115 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
116 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
117 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
118 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
119 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
120 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
122 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
123 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
124 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
125 `default' face and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
126
25951
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
127 ** New face `menu'.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
128
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
129 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
130 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
131 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
132
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
133 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
135 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
136 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
137 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
138 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
140 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
141 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
142 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
144 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
145 `ScreenGamma'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
147 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
149 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
150 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
151 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
152 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
153 the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
155 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
157 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
158 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
159 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
160 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
161 specify a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
162
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
163 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
164 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
165 under Lisp changes, below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
167 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
169 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
170 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
171 it is hollow.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
173 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
174 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
175 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
176 customizing face `fringe'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
178 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
179 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
181 ** LessTif support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
183 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
184 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
186 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
188 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
189 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
190 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
191 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
192 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
193 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
195 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
196 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
197 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
198 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
199 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
200 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
202 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
203 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
204 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
205 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
206 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
207 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
209 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
210 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
211 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
212 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
213 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
215 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
216
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
217 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
218 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
219 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
221 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
223 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
224 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
225 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
226 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
227 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
228 whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
230 ** Busy-cursor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
232 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
233 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
235 ** Blinking cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
237 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
238 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
239 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
240 the group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
242 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
244 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
245 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
246 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
247 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
249 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
250 have to do anything to activate it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
252 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
254 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
255 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
256 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
257 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
259 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
261 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
263 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
265 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
266 one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
267
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
268 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
269 Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
271 ** Hscrolling in C code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
273 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
275 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
277 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
278 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
279
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
280 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
282 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
283 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
284 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
285 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
286 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
288 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
290 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
291 buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
293 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
294 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
296 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
297
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
298 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
299 toggles the read-only status.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
301 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
303 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
305 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
306 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
307 non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
309 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
311 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
312 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
313 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
314 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
315 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
316 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
318 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
320 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
321 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
322 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
323 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
324 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
326 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
327 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
328 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
329 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
330 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
331 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
333 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
334
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
335 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
337 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
338 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
339 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
341 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
342 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
344 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
345 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
346 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
348 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
350 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
351 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
352 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
353 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
355 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
356 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
357 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
358 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
360 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
361 notably at the end of lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
363 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
364 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
366 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
367 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
368 after each match to get the replacement text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
370 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
372 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
373 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
374 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
375 by setting the following variable:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
376
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
377 - User option: max-mini-window-height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
379 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
380 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
381 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
383 Default is 0.25.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
384
27017
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
385 ** Changes to hideshow.el
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
386
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
387 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
388 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
389
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
390 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
391
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
392 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
393 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
394 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
395 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
396 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
397 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
398
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
399 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
400 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
401 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
402 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
403
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
404 *** Isearch support for updating mode line
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
405
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
406 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
407 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
408 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
409 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
410 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
411
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
412 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
413 something like this in your .emacs.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
414
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
415 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
416 (lambda ()
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
417 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
418
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
419 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
420
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
421 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
422 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
423 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
424
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
425 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
426 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
27005
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
427
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
428 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
429 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
430
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
431 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
432 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
433 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
434 a file.
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
435
26964
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
436 ** Changes in Font Lock
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
437
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
438 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
439 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
440 mode.
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
441
26606
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
442 ** Comint (subshell) changes
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
443
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
444 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
445 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
446
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
447 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
448 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
449 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
450
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
451 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
452 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
453 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
454
26835
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
455 ** Changes to Rmail mode
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
456
27361
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
457 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
458 like `j'.
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
459
27381
622e861dce48 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27378
diff changeset
460 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
622e861dce48 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27378
diff changeset
461 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
27378
af3075bcc264 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27369
diff changeset
462 digest message.
26835
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
463
26271
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
464 ** Changes to TeX mode
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
465
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
466 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
467 `latex-mode'.
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
468
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
469 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
471 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
472 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
473 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
474 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
475 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
476 can be edited from that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
477
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
478 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
479 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
480 `A' to use all marked entries).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
482 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
483 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
485 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
486 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
487 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
488 been cited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
489
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
490 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
491 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
492 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
493 in column 1 are always made leaves.
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
494
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
495 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
496 has the following new features:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
498 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
499 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
500 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
501 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
503 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
504 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
505 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
506 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
507 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
508 defaults to 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
510 ** Tooltips.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
512 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
513 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
514 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
516 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
517 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
518 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
519 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
521 ** Customize changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
523 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
26096
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
524 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
525 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
527 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
528 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
529 default).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
530
26834
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
531 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
532 between custom options. Example:
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
533
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
534 (defcustom default-input-method nil
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
535 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
536 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
537 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
538 :group 'mule
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
539 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
540 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
541
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
542 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
543 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
544 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
545
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
546 ** New features in evaluation commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
548 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
549 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
550 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
551 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
552 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
554 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
556 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
557 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
558 is, delete only empty directories.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
560 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
561 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
562 copy directories recursively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
563
26728
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
564 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
565 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
566 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
567
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
568 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
569 use the -f option when sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
570
26820
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
571 ** CC mode changes.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
572
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
573 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
574 current user setups (although it's believed that these
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
575 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
576 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
577 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
578 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
579 release.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
580
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
581 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
582 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
583 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
584 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
585 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
586 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
587 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
588 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
589
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
590 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
591 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
592 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
593 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
594 above.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
595
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
596 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
597 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
598 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
599 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
600 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
601 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
602 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
603 function documentation for more info.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
604
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
605 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
606 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
607 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
608 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
609 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
610 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
611 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
612 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
613
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
614 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
615
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
616 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
617 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
618
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
619 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
620 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
621 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
622 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
623 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
624 style system.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
625
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
626 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
627 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
628 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
629 as far as possible.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
630
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
631 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
632 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
633 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
634 chapter about this in the manual.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
635
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
636 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
637 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
638 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
639 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
640 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
641
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
642 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
643 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
644 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
645
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
646 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
647 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
648
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
649 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
650 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
651 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
652 inside CC Mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
653
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
654 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
655 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
656 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
657 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
658 cc-mode/).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
659
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
660 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
661 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
662 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
663 literals.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
664
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
665 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
666 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
667 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
668 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
669 this function.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
670
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
671 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
672 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
673 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
674 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
675 Thanks to Eric Eide.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
676
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
677 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
678 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
679 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
680
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
681 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
682
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
683 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
684 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
685 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
686 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
687
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
688 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
689 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
690 the column specified by comment-column.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
691
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
692 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
693 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
694 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
695 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
696 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
697 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
698
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
699 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
700 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
701 arguments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
702
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
703 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
704
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
705 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
706 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
707 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
708 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
709 Provan).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
710
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
711 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
712
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
713 ** Isearch changes
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
714
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
715 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
716 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
717
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
718 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
719
26417
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
720 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
721 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
722 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
723 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
724 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
725 `secondary-selection'.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
726
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
727 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
728 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
729 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
730 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
731 usual snappy response.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
732
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
733 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
734 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
735 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
736 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
737
27470
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
738 ** Changes in sort.el
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
739
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
740 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
27533
6dfbe5197843 A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27498
diff changeset
741 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
27470
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
742 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
743 numeric base.
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
744
25929
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
745 ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
746 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
747 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
748
25984
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
749 ** Shell script mode changes.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
750
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
751 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
752 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
753 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
754
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
755 ** Etags changes.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
756
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
757 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
758
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
759 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
26292
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
760 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
761 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
762 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
763 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
764
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
765 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
766 declarations when given the --declarations option.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
767
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
768 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
769 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
770
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
771 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
772 types.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
773
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
774 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
775
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
776 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
777
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
778 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
779 are now tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
780
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
781 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
782 variables are tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
783
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
784 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
785
26292
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
786 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
787 for PSWrap.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
788
26728
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
789 ** Changes in etags.el
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
790
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
791 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
792 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
793
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
794 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
795 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
796 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
797 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
798
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
799 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
800
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
801 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
802 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
803
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
804 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
805
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
806 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
807 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
808 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
809
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
810 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
811 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
812
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
813 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
814 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
815
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
816 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
817 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
818 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
819
26016
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
820 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
821 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
822 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
823 currently no specific input method support for them.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
824
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
825 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
826 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
827 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
828
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
829 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
830
26768
02eb997314dc view-emacs-problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26737
diff changeset
831 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
02eb997314dc view-emacs-problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26737
diff changeset
832
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
833 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
834
27644
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
835 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
836 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
837 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
838
27498
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
839 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
840 PostScript.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
841
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
842 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
843
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
844 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
845
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
846 ; comment (until end of line)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
847 A non-terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
848 "C" terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
849 ?C? special
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
850 $A default non-terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
851 $"C" default terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
852 $?C? default special
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
853 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
854 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
855 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
856 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
857 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
858 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
859 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
860 C+ one or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
861 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
862 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
863 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
864 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
865 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
866 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
867 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
868
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
869 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
870
27328
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
871 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
872 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
873 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
874 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
875 equal signs of assignments.
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
876
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
877 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
878 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
879
27016
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
880 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
881 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
882 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
883 customize the package.
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
884
27733
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
885 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
886 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
887 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
888 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
889 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
890 which answers different needs.
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
891
26964
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
892 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
893 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
894 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
895 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
896 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
897 to be enabled.
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
898
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
899 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
900 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
901
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
902 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
903
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
904 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
905
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
906 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
908 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
909 Pascal) language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
910
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
911 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
912 the text at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
914 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
915
25862
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
916 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
917
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
918 *** whitespace.el ???
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
919
25992
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
920 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
921 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
922 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
923 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
924 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
925 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
926 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
927
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
928 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
929
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
930 Here is an example of columns:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
931
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
932 horse apple bus
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
933 dog pineapple car EXTRA
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
934 porcupine strawberry airplane
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
935
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
936 Doing the following settings:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
937
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
938 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
939 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
940 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
941 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
942
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
943
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
944 Selecting the lines above and typing:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
945
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
946 M-x delimit-columns-region
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
947
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
948 It results:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
949
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
950 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
951 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
952 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
953
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
954 delim-col has the following options:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
955
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
956 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
957 before all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
958
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
959 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
960 between each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
961
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
962 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
963 after all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
964
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
965 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
966 each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
967
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
968 delim-col has the following commands:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
969
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
970 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
971 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
972
26030
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
973 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
974 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
975 is displayed in the "Files" menu.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
976
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
977 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
978
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
979 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
980
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
981 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
982 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
983
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
984 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
985 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
986
26149
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
987 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
988 text.
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
989
26924
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
990 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
26786
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
991 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
992 specific to Message mode.
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
993
26924
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
994 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
995 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
996 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
997
27714
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
998 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
999 interface to access directory servers using different directory
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1000 protocols. It has a separate manual.
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1001
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1002 *** glasses.el
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1003
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1004 *** windmove.el
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1005
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1006 ** Withdrawn packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1008 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1009 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
26133
5eb182b0c724 eval-reg removed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26107
diff changeset
1010
27369
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1011 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1012
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1013 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1015 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1017 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1018 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1019 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1020 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1021
28037
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1022 ** The function documentation-property now evaluates the value of
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1023 the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1024 and isn't a string.
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1025
27881
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1026 +++
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1027 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1028
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1029 ** The new function `replace-regexps-in-string' replaces all matches
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1030 for a regexp in a string.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1031
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1032 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1033 `mouse-position-function'.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1034
27827
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1035 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1036 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1037
27820
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1038 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1039 Keywords are now always considered constants.
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1040
27770
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1041 +++
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1042 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1043 returns it.
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1044
27276
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1045 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1046 returned by function `recent-keys'.
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1047
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1048 +++
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1049 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1050 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1051 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1052 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1053 mode.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1054
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1055 +++
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1056 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1057 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1058
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1059 +++
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1060 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1061 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1062 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1063 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1064 been performed."
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1065
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1066 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1067 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1068 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1069 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1070
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1071 +++
26737
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1072 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1073 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1074 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1075
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1076 +++
26467
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1077 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1078 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1079 specified table.
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1080
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1081 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1082
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1083 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1084 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1085 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1086 what BODY returns.
26467
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1087
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1088 +++
27693
d8bedafef8d5 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27644
diff changeset
1089 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
d8bedafef8d5 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27644
diff changeset
1090 Perl's non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1091
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1092 +++
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1093 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1094 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1095
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1096 +++
26360
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1097 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1098 instead of being optional.
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1099
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1100 +++
26277
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1101 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1102 modify read-only text.
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1103
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1104 +++
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1105 ** New functions and variables for locales.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1106
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1107 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1108 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
26525
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1109 time functions like strftime. The new variables
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1110 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1111 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1112
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1113 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1114 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1115 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
26525
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1116 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1117 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1118 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1119 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1120
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1121 +++
26107
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1122 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1123 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1124 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1125 start sequences.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1126
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1127 +++
25910
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1128 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1129 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1130
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1131 +++
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1132 ** New function `propertize'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1134 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1135 strings with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1137 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1139 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1140 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1141 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1142 specified value of that property. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1144 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1146 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1147 ** push and pop macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1148
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1149 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1150 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1151 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1153 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1154 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1155 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1156
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1157 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1158
27387
d0a7127b33e5 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27385
diff changeset
1159 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
d0a7127b33e5 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27385
diff changeset
1160 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1161
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1162 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1163 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1164 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1165 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1166
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1167 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1168 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1169 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1170 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1171
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1172 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1173 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1174 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1176 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1177 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1178 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1179 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1180 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1181 space, and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1182 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1183 and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1184 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1185 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1186 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1187 [:alpha:] matches letters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1188 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1189 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1190 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1191 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1192 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1193 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1194 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1195 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1196 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1197 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1198 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1200 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1201 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1203 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1205 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1207 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1208 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1210 :test TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1212 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1213 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1214 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1216 :size SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1218 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1219 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1221 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1223 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1224 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1225 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1226 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1227 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1229 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1231 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1232 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1233 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1235 :weakness WEAK
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1237 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1238 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1239 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1240 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1242 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1244 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1246 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1248 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1250 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1252 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1253 values are shared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1255 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1257 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1259 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1261 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1263 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1265 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1267 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1269 Returns the size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1271 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1273 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1275 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1277 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1279 - Function: clrhash TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1281 Clear TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1283 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1285 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1286 not found.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1287
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1288 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1290 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1291 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1293 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1295 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1297 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1299 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1300 arguments KEY and VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1302 - Function: sxhash OBJ
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1304 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1306 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1308 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1309 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1310 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1311 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1312 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1314 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1316 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1317 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1318 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1320 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1321 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1323 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1324 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1326 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1327 (sxhash (upcase a)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1328
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1329 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1330 'case-fold-string-hash))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1332 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1334 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1335 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1337 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1338 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1339 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1341 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1342 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1344 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1345 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1347 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1348 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1349 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1350 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1351 is too short to reach that column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1353 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1354 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1355 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1356 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1357 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1359 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1360 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1361 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1363 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1364 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1365 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1367 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1368 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1369 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1371 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1372 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1373 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1374 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1375 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1376 temporary-file-directory instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1378 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1379 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1380 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1381 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1382 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1384 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1385 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1386 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1388 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1389 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1391 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1392 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1393 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1395 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1396 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1398 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1399 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1400 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1401 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1402 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1403 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1405 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1406 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1407 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1408 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1410 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1411 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1413 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1414 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1415 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1416 result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1418 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1419 string where arguments appear in the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1421 Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1423 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1424 (s2 "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1425 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1426 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1427 (format s1 s2))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1429 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1431 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1432 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1434 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1435 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1436 argument in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1438 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1439 (arg "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1440 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1441 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1442 (message msg arg))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1444 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1445 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1447 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1448 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1450 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1451 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1452 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1453
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1454 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1455 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1456 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1457 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1458 sound to play, before playing the sound.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1459
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1460 The following sound properties are supported:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1462 - `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1463
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1464 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1465 searched relative to `data-directory'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1466
27148
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1467 - `:data DATA'
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1468
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1469 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1470 may be present, but not both.
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1471
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1472 - `:volume VOLUME'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1474 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1475 0..1. This property is optional.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1477 Other properties are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1479 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
26933
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1480
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1481 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1482 a keyword symbol.
27145
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1483
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1484 ** Changes to garbage collection
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1485
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1486 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1487 of live and free strings.
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1488
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1489 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1490 strings that have been consed so far.
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1491
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1492
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1493 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1495 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1496 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1497 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1498 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1500 ** New face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1502 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1503 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1505 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1506 *** New faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1507
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1508 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1510 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1511
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1512 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1513 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1514
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1515 3. Font height in 1/10pt
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1516
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1517 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1518
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1519 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1520
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1521 6. Foreground color.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1522
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1523 7. Background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1525 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1527 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1529 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1531 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1533 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1534 color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1536 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1537 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1539 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1540 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1541 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1542 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1543 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1544 attributes mentioned above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1545
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1546 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1547 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1548 created frames.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1549
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1550 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1551 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1552 `fully-specified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1554 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1555 *** Face merging.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1557 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1558 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1559 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1560 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1561 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1562 results in a fully-specified face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1564 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1565 *** Face realization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1567 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1568 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1569 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1570 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1571 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1572 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1574 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1575 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1576 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1577 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1579 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1580 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1581 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1582 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1583 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1585 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1586 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1587 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1588 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1589 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1590 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1592 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1593 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1594 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1595 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1596
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1597 ++++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1598 **** Clearing face caches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1599
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1600 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1601 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1602 unused fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1604 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1605 *** Font selection.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1606
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1607 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1608 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1609 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1611 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1612 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1613 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1614 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1615 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1617 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1618 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1619 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1621 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1622
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1623 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1624 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1625 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1626 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1627 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1628 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1629 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1630
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1631 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1632 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1633 face doesn't exist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1634
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1635 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1636 **** Scalable fonts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1638 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1639 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1640 servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1642 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1643 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1644 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1645 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1646 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1647 that list. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1649 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1651 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1653 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1654 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1656 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1657
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1658 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1659 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1660 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1662 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1663 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1664 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1665 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1666 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1667 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1668 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1669 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1670 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1671 of the face font sort order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1672
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1673 - Function: x-font-family-list
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1675 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1676 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1677 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1678 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1680 - Variable: font-list-limit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1682 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1683 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1684 matching font. The default is currently 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1686 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1687 *** Setting face attributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1688
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1689 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1690 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1691 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1692 `face-attribute'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1694 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1695 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1696
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1697 The following attributes are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1699 `:family'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1701 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1702 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1703 and `?' are allowed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1705 `:width'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1707 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1708 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1709 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1710 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1712 `:height'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1714 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1715 1/10 pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1717 `:weight'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1719 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1720 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1721 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1723 `:slant'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1725 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1726 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1727 `reverse-oblique'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1729 `:foreground', `:background'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1730
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1731 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1733 `:underline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1735 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1736 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1737 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1738 don't underline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1739
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1740 `:overline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1742 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1743 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1744 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1745 overline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1747 `:strike-through'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1749 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1750 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1751 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1752 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1754 `:box'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1756 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1757 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1758 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1759 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1760 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1761 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1762 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1763 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1764 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1765 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1766 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1767 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1768 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1769 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1770 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1771 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1772 box.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1774 `:inverse-video'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1775
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1776 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1777 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1778
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1779 `:stipple'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1781 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1782 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1783 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1784 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1785 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1786 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1788 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1789 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1791 `:font'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1792
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1793 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1794 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1795 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1796 versions of Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1798 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1799 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1800 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1801
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1802 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1803 `defface'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1805 *** Face attributes and X resources
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1807 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1808 from X resources:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1810 Face attribute X resource class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1811 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1812 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1813 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1814 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1815 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1816 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1817 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1818 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1819 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1820 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1821 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1822 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1823 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1824 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1825 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1826 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1827 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1828 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1829 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1830 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1832 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1833 *** Text property `face'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1835 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1836 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1837 specification can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1839 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1841 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1842 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1843 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1844 for face attribute names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1845
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1846 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1847 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1848 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1849
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1850 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1851 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1852
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1853 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1854 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1855 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1856 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1857 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1858 used to clear the mapping table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1859
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1860 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1861
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1862 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1863 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1864 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1865 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1866 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1867 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1868 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1869 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1870 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1871 modify their color-related behavior.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1872
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1873 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1874 any frame type.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1875
27573
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1876 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1877
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1878 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1879 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1880 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1881 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1882 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1883 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1884 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1885 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1886 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1887
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1888 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1889 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1890
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1891 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1893 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1894 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1895 Otherwise, it returns zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1896
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1897 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1898
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1899 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1900 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1901 text-property.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1902
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1903 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1904 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1905 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1906 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
27144
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1907 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1908 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1909 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1910 functions.
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1911
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1912 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1913 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1914 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1915
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1916 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1917
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1918 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1919
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1920 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1921 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1922 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1923 constrained position if that is is different.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1924
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1925 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1926 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1927 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1928 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1929 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1930 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1931 fields.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1932
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1933 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1934 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1935 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1936 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1937 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1938
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1939 - Function: erase-field &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1940
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1941 Erases the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1942 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1943 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1944
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1945 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1946
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1947 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1948 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1949 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1950 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1951 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1952
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1953 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1954
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1955 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1956 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1957 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1958 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1959 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1960
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1961 - Function: field-string &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1962
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1963 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1964 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1965 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1966
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1967 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1968
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1969 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1970 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1971 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1972
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1973 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1974 ** Image support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1976 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1977 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1978 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1979 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1981 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1982 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1983 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1984 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1985 area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1986
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1987 IMAGE is an image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1988
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1989 *** Image specifications
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1990
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1991 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1992 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1993 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
26403
03830fdf5186 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26397
diff changeset
1994 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
03830fdf5186 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26397
diff changeset
1995 described below are ignored.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1997 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1999 `:ascent ASCENT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2000
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2001 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2002 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2004 `:margin MARGIN'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2005
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2006 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2007 margin around the image. Default is 0.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2009 `:relief RELIEF'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2010
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2011 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2012 around an image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2014 `:algorithm ALGO'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2016 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2017 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2018 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2019 which is intended to display images "disabled."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2021 `:heuristic-mask BG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2023 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2024 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2025 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2026 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2027 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2028 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2029 background of the image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2030
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2031 `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2032
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2033 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2034 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2035 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2036 may be present in the image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2037
27076
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2038 `:data DATA'
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2039
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2040 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2041 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2042 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2043 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2044
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2045 *** Supported image types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2046
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2047 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2049 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2050 properties supported are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2052 `:foreground FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2054 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2055 is the frame's foreground.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2056
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2057 `:background FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2059 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2060 the frame's background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2061
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2062 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2063 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2064 instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2066 `:width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2068 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2070 `:height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2072 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2074 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2076 DATA must be either
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2078 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2079 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2081 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2082
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2083 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2084 bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2086 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2088 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2089 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2090 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2091 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2093 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2095 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2096
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2097 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2098 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2099 name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2101 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2102 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2104 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2105 to display compressed images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2106
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2107 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2109 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2110 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2111 defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2113 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2115 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
27055
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2116 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2117 are:
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2118
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2119 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2121 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2122 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2123 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2125 **** GIF, image type `gif'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2127 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2128 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2130 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2132 `:index INDEX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2134 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2135 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2137 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2138 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2139 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2140 every 0.1 seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2142 (defun show-anim (file max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2143 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2144 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2146 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2147 (when (= idx max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2148 (setq idx 0))
27076
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2149 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2150 (save-excursion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2151 (set-buffer buffer)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2152 (goto-char (point-min))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2153 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2154 (insert-image img "x"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2155 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2157 **** PNG, image type `png'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2159 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2160 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2161 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2162
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2163 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2165 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2167 `:pt-width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2169 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2170 integer. This is a required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2172 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2174 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2175 must be a integer. This is an required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2177 `:bounding-box BOX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2178
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2179 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2180 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2181 files. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2183 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2184 lisp/gs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2186 *** Lisp interface.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2187
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2188 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2189 which are supported in the current configuration.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2191 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2192 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2193 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2194 manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2196 *** Simplified image API, image.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2198 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2199 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2200 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2201 define an image based on available image types. The functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2202 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2203 buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2205 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2206 ** Display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2208 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2209 and images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2211 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2212 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2213 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2214 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2215 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2216 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2217 of the display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2219 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2220 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2221 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2222 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2223 in this file).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2225 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2226 ** Help display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2228 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2229 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2230 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2231 that have a `help-echo' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2233 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2234 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2235 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2236 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2237 tool-bar item is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2239 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2240 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2241 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2243 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2244 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2246 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2247 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2249 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2250 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2251 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2252 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2253 used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2254
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2255 (global-set-key [A-down]
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2256 #'(lambda ()
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2257 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2258 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2259 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2260 (global-set-key [A-up]
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2261 #'(lambda ()
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2262 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2263 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2264 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2266 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2267 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2269 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2270 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2271 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2272 is called with one argument, POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2274 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2275 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2276 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2277 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2278 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2279
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2280 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2281 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2283 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2284 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2285 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2286 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2287 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2288 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2290 *** Tool bar item definitions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2292 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2293 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2294 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2295
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2296 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2297 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2298 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2299 property (see below).
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2300
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2301 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2302 binding are currently ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2304 The following properties are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2306 `:enable FORM'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2307
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2308 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2309 or disabled.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2310
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2311 `:visible FORM'
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2312
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2313 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2314
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2315 `:filter FUNCTION'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2317 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2318 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2319 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2320
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2321 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2323 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2324 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2325
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2326 `:image IMAGES'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2328 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2329 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2330 meaning of each of the four elements:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2332 Index Use when item is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2333 ----------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2334 0 enabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2335 1 enabled and deselected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2336 2 disabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2337 3 disabled and deselected
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2338
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2339 `:help HELP-STRING'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2340
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2341 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2342 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2344 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2346 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2347 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2348 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2349
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2350 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2351 raised when the mouse moves over them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2353 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2354 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2355 pixels. Default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2357 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2358 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2360 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2361
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2362 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2363 a tool bar item. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2365 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2366 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2367 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2368
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2369 is the original tool bar item definition, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2371 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2373 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2374 item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2376 ** Mode line changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2378 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2379 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2381 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2382 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2383 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2385 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2386 a `local-map' text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2388 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2389 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2391 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2392 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2393 `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2395 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2396 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2397 example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2398
26359
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2399 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2400 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2401
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2402 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2403 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2404 variable mode-line-format to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2405
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2406 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2407 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2409 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2410 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2411 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2412 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2413 line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2415 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2416 `header-line'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2418 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2419 position in the header-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2421 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2422 ** Text property `display'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2423
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2424 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2425 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2426 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2427 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2429 *** Variable width and height spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2431 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2432 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2433 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2434 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2435 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2436 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2437 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2439 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2440 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2441 properties described below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2443 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2444 characters having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2446 - :width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2448 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2449 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2451 - :relative-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2453 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2454 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2455 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2456 width of that character by FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2458 - :align-to HPOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2459
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2460 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2461 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2463 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2465 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2467 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2468 normal line height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2470 - :relative-height FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2472 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2473 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2475 - :ascent ASCENT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2477 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2478 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2479 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2480 equal to 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2482 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2484 *** Images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2486 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2487 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2488 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2489 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2490 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2491 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2492 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2493 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2494 as display specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2496 *** Other display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2498 - :space-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2500 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2501 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2502 integer or float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2504 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2506 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2507
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2508 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2509 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2510 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2511 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2512 a font is available counts as a step.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2513
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2514 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2515 as tall as the frame's default font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2517 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2518 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2520 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2521 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2523 - :raise FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2525 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2526 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2527 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2528 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2529 `:height' subproperty.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2531 *** Conditional display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2533 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2534 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2535 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2536 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2537 the text having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2539 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2540 `(:when t SPEC)'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2541
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2542 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2543 ** New menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2545 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2546 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2547 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2548 to specify other menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2550 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2552 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2553 separator occurs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2555 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2556
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2557 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2558
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2559 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2561 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2563 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2565 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2567 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2569 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2571 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2573 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2574 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2576 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2578 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2579
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2580 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2582 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2583
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2584 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2586 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2588 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2590 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2592 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2594 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2596 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2598 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2599
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2600 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2602 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2604 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2605 the corresponding single-line separators.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2606
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2607 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2608 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2610 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2611 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2612 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2613 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2614 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2615 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2616 default foreground is black.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2618 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2619 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2620 `ScrollBarBackground').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2622 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2623 settings for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2625 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2626 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2627 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2629 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2630 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2631 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2632 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2633 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2634 the original window start.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2636 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2637 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2638 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2639 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2641 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2642 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2644 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2645 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2646 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2647 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2649 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2650 fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2652 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2653
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2654 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2655 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2656 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2657 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2658 temporarily to nil, for example
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2660 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2661 (enlarge-window 10))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2662
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2663 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2664 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2665 ^L
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2666 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2667
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2668 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2669 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2671 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2673 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2675 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2676 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2677 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2679 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2680 is the one that is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2681
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2682 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2683 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2684 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2685 separate from the command's regular output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2686 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2687 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2688 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2689 the buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2691 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2692 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2693 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2694 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2696 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2697 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2698 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2699 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2701 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2702 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2703 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2704 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2706 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2707 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2708 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2709 they never ignore case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2711 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2712 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2713 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2714 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2715 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2716 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2717 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2719 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2720 the same format that was used in the file before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2722 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2723 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2725 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2726 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2727 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2729 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2730 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2731 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2732 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2733 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2734 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2735 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2737 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2738 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2739 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2740 format. You can now customize these variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2742 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2743 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2744 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2745 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2746
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2747 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2748 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2749 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2751 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2752 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2753 doesn't have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2754
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2755 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2756 not one per buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2758 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2759 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2760 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2761
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2762 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2763 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2764 `auto-show-mode' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2766 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2767 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2768 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2769 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2770 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2771
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2772 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2773 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2775 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2776 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2777 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2778
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2779 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2780 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2781 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2782 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2784 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2786 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2787 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2788 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2789 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2790 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2792 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2793 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2795 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2796 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2797 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2798 `?' on other systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2800 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2801 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2802 Unix.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2804 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2805 current codepage when it starts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2807 ** Mail changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2808
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2809 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2810 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2811 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2812 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2813 buffer-file-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2814
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2815 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2816 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2817 mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2818
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2819 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2820 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2821 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2822 list of possible coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2824 ** CC Mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2826 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2827 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2828 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2829 docstring for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2831 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2832 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2833 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2834 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2835 lineup functions use this feature currently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2836
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2837 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2838 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2839
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2840 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2841 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2843 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2844 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2845 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2846 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2847 anonymous classes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2849 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2850 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2852 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2853 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2854 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2855 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2856
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2857 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2858 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2859 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2860 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2861 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2863 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2864
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2865 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2866
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2867 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2868 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2870 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2872 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2873 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2874 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2875 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2876 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2877
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2878 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2880 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2881 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2882 Gnus manual for the full story.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2884 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2885 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2886 group, which is created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2888 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2889 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2891 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2893 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2894 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2896 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2897 `C-u C-c C-c'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2898
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2899 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2901 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2902 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2903
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2904 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2905
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2906 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2907 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2909 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2910 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2912 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2913 control over simplification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2914
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2915 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2917 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2918 limit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2920 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2922 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2923
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2924 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2925 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2926 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2927
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2928 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2929 `a' forces normal posting method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2931 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2932 -- `W d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2934 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2935 to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2936
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2937 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2938 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2940 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2941 has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2943 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2945 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2946
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2947 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2948 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2949
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2950 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2951 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2953 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2955 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2956 been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2958 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2959 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2961 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2962 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2963
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2964 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2966 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2968 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2970 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2972 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2973 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2974 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2976 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2977 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2978 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2979 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2980 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2981
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2982 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2983 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2984 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2985 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2986
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2987 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2988 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2989 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2990 mismatch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2992 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2994 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2995 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2997 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2998 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2999 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3000 removed from the label.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3002 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3003 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3005 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3006 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3008 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3009 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3010 expressions.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3012 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3014 ** New/deleted modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3016 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3017 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3019 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3020 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3021 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3023 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3024 changes with a special face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3026 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3027 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3028 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3030 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3032 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3033 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3034 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3035 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3036 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3037
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3038 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3039 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3040 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3041
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3042 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3043 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3044 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3045 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3046 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3047 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3048 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3049 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3050 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3052 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3053 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3054 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3055 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3056 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3057 program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3059 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3060 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3061 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3062 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3063 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3064 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3066 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3067 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3068 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3069 was not documented clearly before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3070
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3071 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3072 This includes Tetris and Snake.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3074 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3076 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3077 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3078 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3079 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3081 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3082 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3083 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3085 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3087 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3088 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3090 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3091 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3092 integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3094 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3095 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3096 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3097 file names and attributes are returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3099 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3100 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3101 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3102 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3103 returns the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3105 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3106 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3108 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3110 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3111 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3112 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3113 optionally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3115 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3116 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3118 **
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3119 The new function process-running-child-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3120 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3121 terminal to its own child process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3123 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3124 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3125 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3126 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3128 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3129 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3131 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3132 :included is an alias for :visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3134 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3135 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3136 to move or copy menu entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3138 ** Multibyte editing changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3140 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3141 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3142 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3143 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3144 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3145 (setq char (sref str idx)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3146 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3147 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3149 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3150 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3151 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3153 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3154 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3155 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3157 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3159 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3160 across the boundary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3162 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3163 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3164 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3165 contains 8-bit characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3166 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3167 contains invalid characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3169 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3170 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3171 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3172 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3173 way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3175 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3176 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3177 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3178 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3179
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3180 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3181 compose Thai characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3183 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3184 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3185 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3186 menus should always use the third argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3188 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3189 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3190 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3191 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3193 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3194 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3195 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3196 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3198 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3199 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3200 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3201 echo area contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3203 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3205 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3206 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3207 requested feature cannot be loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3209 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3210 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3211 means to clear out that attribute.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3213 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3214 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3216 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3217 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3218 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3219 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3221 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3222 the gap of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3224 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3225 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3226 current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3228 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3229 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3230 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3231 it back in after any modifications have been made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3233 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3235 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3236 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3237 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3238 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3239 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3241 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3242 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3243 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3244 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3245 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3246
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3247 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3248 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3249 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3251 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3252 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3253 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3254 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3255 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3256 results.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3258 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3259 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3260 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3261 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3263 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3265 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3266 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3267 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3268 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3270 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3271 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3272 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3273 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3274 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3275 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3276 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3277 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3279 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3280 selective undo.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3281
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3282 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3283 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3284 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3285 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3286 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3288 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3289 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3290 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3291 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3293 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3294 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3295 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3296 something that most users not do.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3298 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3299 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3300 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3301 applications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3303 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3304 pasting operations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3306 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3307 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3308 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3309 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3310 `ps-printer-name'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3312 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3313 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3314 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3315 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3316 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3317 hits a new word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3319 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3320 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3321 to be confused by TeX commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3323 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3324 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3325 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3326 of various alternative replacements and actions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3328 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3329 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3330 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3331 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3332 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3334 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3335 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3336
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3337 ** Changes in input method usage.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3339 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3340 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3341 respectively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3342
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3343 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3345 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3346 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3348 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3349 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3351 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3353 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3355 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3356 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3358 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3359 given in the following case:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3360 o When you are using a complex input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3361 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3363 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3364 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3365 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3366 setting it to t is helpful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3367
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3368 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3370 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3371 keys:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3372 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3373 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3374 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3375 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3376 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3378 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3379 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3380 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3381 get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3383 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3385 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3386
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3387 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3388 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3390 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3391 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3392 its owner and group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3394 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3395 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3397 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3398 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3400 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3401 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3402 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3403 by the left edge of the rectangle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3405 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3406 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3407 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3408 for writing keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3410 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3411 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3412 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3413 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3414 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3415 info.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3417 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3419 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3420 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3421 contents only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3423 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3424 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3425 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3426 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3428 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3429 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3430 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3432 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3433 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3434 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3435 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3436
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3437 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3438 failure if the command produces no output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3439
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3440 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3441 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3442 the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3444 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3445 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3446 function and variable names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3448 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3449 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3450 file-coding-system-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3452 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3453 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3454 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3455 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3456 according to the current fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3458 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3459
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3460 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3461 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3462 nonascii-insert-offset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3463
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3464 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3465 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3466 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3467 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3469 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3470 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3472 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3473 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3475 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3476 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3477 command keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3479 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3480 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3482 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3483 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3484 all variables that have documentation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3486 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3487 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3488 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3489 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3490 it should show; the default is 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3492 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3493 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3494 of your input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3496 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3497 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3498 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3499 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3500 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3501 Newly added options are included as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3503 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3504 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3505 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3507 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3508 Customize menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3510 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3511 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3512
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3513 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3514 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3515 invoked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3517 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3518 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3519 The default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3521 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3522 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3523 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3524 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3525 sensibly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3527 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3529 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3530 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3531 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3533 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3534 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3535 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3536 every night.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3538 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3539 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3541 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3542 read and post multi-lingual articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3544 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3545 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3546 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3547 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3548 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3549 made invisible again.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3551 ** Mail reading and sending changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3553 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3554 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3555 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3556 toggle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3558 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3559 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3560 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3561 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3562 rmail-default-body-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3564 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3565 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3566 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3568 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3569 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3570 is evaluated to insert the signature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3572 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3573 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3574 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3575 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3576 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3577 especially interested in trying feedmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3579 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3580 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3581 provided by feedmail are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3583 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3584 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3585 there is also a queue for draft messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3587 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3588 be prompted for confirmation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3590 **** does smart filling of address headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3592 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3593 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3594 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3596 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3597 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3598 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3599 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3601 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3603 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3604 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3606 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3607 run Dired on the directory name at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3609 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3610 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3611 for a specified regexp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3613 ** VC Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3615 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3616 conveniently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3618 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3619 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3620 Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3622 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3623 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3624 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3625 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3627 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3628 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3629 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3630 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3631 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3632
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3633 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3634 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3635 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3636 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3637 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3638
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3639 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3640 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3641 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3642 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3644 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3645 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3646 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3647
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3648 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3649 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3650 session to resolve them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3652 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3653 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3654 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3655 uses as well).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3657 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3658 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3659 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3660 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3661 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3662 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3663 using ediff.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3665 ** Changes in Font Lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3667 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3668 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3669 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3670 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3671 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3673 ** Frame name display changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3675 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3676 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3677 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3678 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3680 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3681 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3682 menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3684 ** Comint (subshell) changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3686 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3687 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3688 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3690 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3692 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3693 that is, the line after the last line you got.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3694 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3696 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3697 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3698 the following line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3699
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3700 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3701 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3702 previously sent input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3704 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3705 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3706 as the search string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3708 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3709 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3711 ** C mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3713 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3714 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3715 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3716 definition.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3718 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3719 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3720 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3721 style is still the default however.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3723 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3725 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3726 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3727 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3729 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3730 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3732 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3733 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3735 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3736 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3738 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3739 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3741 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3742 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3743 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3744 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3746 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3747
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3748 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3749 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3750 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3752 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3753 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3754 expanding dynamically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3756 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3757 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3759 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3760 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3761 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3762 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3764 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3766 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3768 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3769 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3770 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3771 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3772 against the first word in the title.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3774 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3775 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3776 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3777 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3778 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3779 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3781 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3782 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3783 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3784 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3786 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3788 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3789 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3790 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3791 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3792 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3793 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3795 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3796 Editing group once the package is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3798 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3799 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3800 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3801
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3802 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3803 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3805 ** Ispell changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3806
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3807 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3808 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3809 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3810
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3811 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3812 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3813 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3814 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3815 include:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3816
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3817 o URLs are automatically skipped
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3818 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3820 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3821
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3822 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3823
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3824 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3825 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3826 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3827 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3829 *** New recursive parser.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3831 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3832 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3833 recursive parser scans the individual files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3835 *** Parsing only part of a document.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3836
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3837 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3838 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3839 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3841 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3843 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3845 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3846
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3847 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3849 *** Using multiple selection buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3850
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3851 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3852 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3854 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3855
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3856 *** References to external documents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3858 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3859 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3860 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3861 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3862 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3863 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3864 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3866 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3868 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3869 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3870
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3871 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3872 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3874 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3876 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3877 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3879 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3881 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3882 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3883 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3884 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3885 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3886 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3887 more.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3888
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3889 *** Support for the varioref package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3891 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3893 *** New hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3895 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3896 and citations are created. These hooks are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3897 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3898 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3900 *** Citations outside LaTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3902 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3903 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3904
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3905 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3907 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3908 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3909 fontified, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3910
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3911 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3913 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3914 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3915 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3916 directories that contain the same file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3917
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3918 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3919 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3920 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3921 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3922 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3923 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3924 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3925 directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3927 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3929 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3930 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3931 it, but some do not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3933 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3934 code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3936 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3937 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3938 around in a buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3940 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3942 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3943 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3944 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3945 established system of notation similar to Chess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3946
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3947 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3948 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3949 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3951 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3952 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3953 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3954 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3955 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3956 the like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3958 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3959 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3961 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3962 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3963 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3964 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3966 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3968 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3969 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3970 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3971 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3972 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3973 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3974 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3975 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3976 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3977 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3978 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3980 Platform-specific modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3981
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3982 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3983 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3984 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3985 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3986 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3987 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3988 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3989 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3990 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3992 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3994 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3995 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3996 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3997 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3999 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4000 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4001 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4002
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4003 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4004 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4005 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4006 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4008 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4009 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4010 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4011 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4013 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4014 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4015 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4016 current input method for reading this one event.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4018 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4019 now control whether to output certain characters as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4020 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4021 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4022 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4023 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4024
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4025 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4027 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4028 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4030 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4031 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4032 always increases point by 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4034 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4035 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4037 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4039 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4040 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4041 default value changed. For example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4043 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4044 :type 'integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4045 :group 'foo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4046 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4047
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4048 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4049 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4051 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4052 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4053 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4054 `:version' in the top level group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4056 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4058 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4059 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4061 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4062 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4063 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4064 to themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4066 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4067 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4068 values whatever.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4070 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4071 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4072 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4074 ** Frame-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4076 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4077 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4078 local bindings for that variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4080 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4081 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4082 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4083 parameter name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4085 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4086 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4087 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4088 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4090 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4091 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4092 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4093 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4095 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4096 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4097 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4098 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4099 See the documentation in sregex.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4101 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4102 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4103 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4104 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4106 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4107 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4109 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4110 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4111 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4113 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4114 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4115 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4116 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4118 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4119 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4120 empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4121
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4122 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4123 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4124 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4125 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4126 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4128 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4129 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4130 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4131 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4133 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4134 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4135 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4136 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4137 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4139 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4140 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4141 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4142 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4144 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4145 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4146 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4147
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4148 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4149 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4150 was directed to display this buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4152 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4153 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4154 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4155 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4156 set-window-configuration.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4158 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4159 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4160 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4161 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4162
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4163 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4164 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4165 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4167 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4168 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4169 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4171 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4172 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4174 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4175 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4177 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4178 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4179 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4181 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4182 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4183 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4184 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4186 ** Menu changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4188 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4189 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4190 better supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4192 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4193 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4194 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4195 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4196 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4198 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4200 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4201 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4202 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4203 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4205 The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4206 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4207 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4208 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4209 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4210 The supported properties include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4212 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4213 item is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4214 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4215 item should appear in the menu.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4216 :filter FILTER-FN
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4217 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4218 which will be REAL-BINDING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4219 It should return a binding to use instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4220 :keys DESCRIPTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4221 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4222 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4223 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4224 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4225 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4226 keyboard binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4227 :key-sequence nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4228 This means that the command normally has no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4229 keyboard equivalent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4230 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4231 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4232 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4233 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4234 value says whether this button is currently selected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4236 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4237 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4239 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4241 ** New event types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4243 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4244 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4245 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4246 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4248 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4250 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4251 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4252 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4253 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4254 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4255 forward, away from the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4257 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4259 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4260 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4261 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4262 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4263 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4265 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4267 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4268 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4269 that were dragged and dropped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4271 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4273 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4275 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4276 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4277 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4279 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4280 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4281 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4283 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4284 in Emacs 19 and before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4286 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4287 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4289 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4290 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4291 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4292 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4293
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4294 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4295 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4296 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4297 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4298 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4300 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4301 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4302 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4303 consistent with the new representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4305 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4306 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4307 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4308 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4310 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4311 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4312 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4314 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4315 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4316 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4318 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4319 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4320 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4322 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4323 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4325 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4326 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4328 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4329 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4330 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4331 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4333 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4334 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4336 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4337 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4338 buffer or string being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4340 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4341 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4342 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4343 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4344 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4345 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4346 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4348 *** Structure of coding system changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4350 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4351 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4352 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4353 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4354 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4355 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4356 define-coding-system-alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4358 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4359 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4360 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4361 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4362 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4363 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4364 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4365 `iso-8859-1'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4367 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4368 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4369 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4370 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4372 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4373 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4374 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4375 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4376
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4377 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4378 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4379 This function requires a user interaction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4381 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4382 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4383 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4384 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4385 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4386 select-safe-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4388 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4389 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4390 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4391 was done.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4393 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4394 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4395 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4397 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4398 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4399 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4400 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4402 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4403 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4404 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4405 converted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4407 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4408 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4410 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4411 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4412 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4413 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4414 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4415 range of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4417 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4418 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4420 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4421 in the current buffer at position POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4423 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4424 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4425 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4426 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4427 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4428 binding input-method-function to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4429
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4430 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4431 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4432 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4433 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4434 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4436 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4437 subsequent events of a key sequence.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4439 *** You can customize any language environment by using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4440 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4441
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4442 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4443 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4444 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4445 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4446 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4448 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4450 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4451 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4452 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4453 tree structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4455 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4456 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4458 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4459 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4460 in your .emacs file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4462 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4463 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4465 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4466 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4468 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4469 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4470 kills the region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4472 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4473 delete the character before point, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4475 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4476 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4477 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4479 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4480 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4481 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4482 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4483 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4484 past.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4486 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4487 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4488 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4489 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4490 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4492 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4493 and is an alias for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4495 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4496 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4498 ** Scrolling changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4500 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4501 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4503 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4504 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4505 where it started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4507 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4508 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4509 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4510 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4512 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4513 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4514 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4515 recenters the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4517 ** International character set support (MULE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4519 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4520 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4521 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4522 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4523 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4524 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4525
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4526 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4527 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4528 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4529 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4530 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4532 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4533 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4534 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4535 language, to make it possible to type them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4537 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4538 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4539
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4540 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4541 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4543 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4545 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4546
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4547 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4548 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4549 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4550 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4551 characters for their work until they want to change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4553 *** Input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4555 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4556 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4557 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4558 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4559 support several input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4561 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4562 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4563 work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4565 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4566 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4567 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4568 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4569 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4570 letter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4572 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4573 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4574 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4575 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4576 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4578 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4579 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4580 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4581 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4583 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4584 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4585 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4586 the first guess is wrong.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4588 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4589 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4590
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4591 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4592 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4593 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4594 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4596 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4597 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4598 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4599 translate automatically to and from either one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4601 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4603 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4604 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4605 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4606 what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4608 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4609 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4610 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4611 multibyte characters in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4613 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4614 character conversion as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4616 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4618 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4619 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4620 requires using many fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4621
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4622 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4623 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4625 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4626 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4627 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4628 you would use a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4630 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4631 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4632 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4634 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4635 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4636 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4637 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4638 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4640 *** Defining fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4642 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4643 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4644 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4646 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4647 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4648 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4649 standard fontset are created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4651 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4652 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4653 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4654 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4655 name is `fontset-startup'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4657 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4658 The resource value should have this form:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4659 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4660 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4661 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4662 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4663 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4664 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4665 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4666 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4667 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4668
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4669 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4670 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4671 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4673 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4674 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4675 following resource,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4676 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4677 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4678 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4679 Here is the substitution rule:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4680 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4681 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4682 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4683 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4684 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4686 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4687 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4688 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4690 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4691 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4692 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4693 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4694 fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4696 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4697 defaults for a particular choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4699 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4700 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4701 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4702 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4703 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4704 system for new files that you create.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4706 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4707 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4708 whole Emacs session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4710 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4711 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4712 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4714 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4715 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4716 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4717 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4718 coding systems that Emacs supports.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4719
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4720 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4721 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4722 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4723 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4724 is used for *the immediately following command*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4725
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4726 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4727 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4729 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4730 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4732 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4733 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4735 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4736 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4737 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4738 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4739 of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4741 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4742 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4743 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4744 translated into that character code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4746 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4747 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4749 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4751 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4752 the coding system for keyboard input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4753
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4754 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4755 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4756 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4758 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4759
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4760 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4761 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4762 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4763 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4764 designed to work with terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4766 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4767 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4768 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4769 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4770 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4771 in the corresponding buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4773 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4775 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4776 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4777 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4778
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4779 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4780 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4781 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4782 want to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4784 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4785 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4786
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4787 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4788 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4789 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4790 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4792 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4793 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4794 related information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4796 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4797 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4798 scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4800 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4801 information about the support for a particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4802 You specify the language as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4804 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4805 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4806 first dash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4807
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4808 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4809 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4810 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4811 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4813 A alternativnyj (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4814 B big5 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4815 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4816 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4817 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4818 E euc-japan (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4819 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4820 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4821 K euc-korea (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4822 R koi8 (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4823 Q tibetan
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4824 S shift_jis (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4825 T lao
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4826 T tis620 (Thai)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4827 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4828 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4829 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4830 v viqr (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4831 z hz (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4832
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4833 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4834 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4835 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4836 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4838 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4839 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4841 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4842 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4843 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4844 Rmail files themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4845
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4846 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4847 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4849 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4850 for sending mail:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4852 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4853 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4854 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4855 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4856 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4858 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4859 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4860 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4861 translations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4863 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4864 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4865 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4866 without any conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4868 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4869 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4870 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4871 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4873 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4874 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4876 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4877 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4879 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4880 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4882 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4883 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4884 in the buffer before point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4886 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4887 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4888 you are using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4890 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4891 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4892
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4893 ** File locking works with NFS now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4895 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4896 in the same directory as FILENAME.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4898 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4899 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4900 can become a bottleneck.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4902 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4903 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4904 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4905 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4906 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4907 so useful that the change is worth while.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4908
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4909 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4910 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4911 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4912 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4914 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4915 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4916 show-paren-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4917
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4918 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4919 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4920 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4922 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4923 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4924 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4925
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4926 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4927 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4928 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4929
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4930 ** Changes in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4931
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4932 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4933 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4934
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4935 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4936 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4938 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4939 previous state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4941 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4942 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4943
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4944 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4945 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4946 not just the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4948 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4949 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4950 turns View mode on or off.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4952 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4953 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4954 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4956 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4957 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4958
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4959 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4960 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4961 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4962 which version to compare with.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4963
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4964 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4965 blocks if a match is inside the block.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4967 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4968 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4969 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4970 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4972 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4973 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4974 blocks, all of them or none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4976 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4977 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4978 confirmation first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4980 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4981 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4982 However, the mode will not be changed if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4983 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4984 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4985 not suitable for ordinary files, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4986 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4988 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4990 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4991 these commands do not change the major mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4992
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4993 ** M-x occur changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4995 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4996 it performs a case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4997
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4998 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4999 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5000 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5002 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5003 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5004 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5005 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5006 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5008 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5009 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5010 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5011 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5013 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5014 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5015 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5017 ** Outline mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5019 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5021 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5023 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5024 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5025 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5026 was already active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5027
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5028 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5029 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5030 get confused by it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5032 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5033 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5035 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5037 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5038 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5039 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5040 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5041
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5042 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5043 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5044 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5046 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5047 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5048 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5050 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5051 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5052 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5053 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5054
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5055 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5056 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5057 can be. The default value is 30.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5059 ** Changes in Mail mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5061 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5062 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5063 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5064 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5065 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5066 behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5068 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5069 compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5070
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5071 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5072 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5073 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5074 buffer that shows the original message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5076 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5077 with separator lines around the contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5078
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5079 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5080 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5081 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5082 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5083
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5084 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5086 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5087 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5088 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5089 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5090
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5091 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5092 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5093 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5095 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5096 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5097 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5099 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5100 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5101 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5102 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5104 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5105 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5106 be taken to be magic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5108 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5109 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5110 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5111
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5112 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5113 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5115 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5116 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5118 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5119
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5120 new key dired.el binding old key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5121 ------- ---------------- -------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5122 * c dired-change-marks c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5123 * m dired-mark m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5124 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5125 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5126 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5127 * u dired-unmark u
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5128 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5129 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5130 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5131 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5132 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5133 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5135 ** Rmail changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5137 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5138 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5139 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5140 each time you run it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5142 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5143 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5144
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5145 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5146 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5147 means to move in the opposite direction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5149 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5150 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5152 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5153 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5154 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5155 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5156 for output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5158 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5159
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5160 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5161
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5162 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5163 Gnus.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5164
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5165 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5166 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5168 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5169 article mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5171 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5173 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5174
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5175 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5177 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5178 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5179 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5181 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5183 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5185 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5186 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5188 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5189 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5190 used to pick articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5191
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5192 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5193 another have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5195 `M-x gnus-change-server'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5196
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5197 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5198 generating lines in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5200 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5201 `M-C-_'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5202
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5203 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5205 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5207 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5209 *** Scores can be decayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5210
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5211 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5213 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5214 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5215
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5216 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5217 the native server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5219 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5221 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5222 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5223
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5224 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5225
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5226 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5227 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5229 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5230 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5232 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5233 a group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5235 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5236 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5238 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5240 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5242 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5244 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5245
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5246 Use the `Y c' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5248 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5250 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5252 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5254 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5255 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5256
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5257 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5259 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5261 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5262 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5264 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5266 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5267 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5268 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5269 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5270 this issue.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5272 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5273 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5274 particular news group. This can be done by:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5276 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5278 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5279 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5280 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5281 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5282 for reading and posting).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5284 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5285 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5286 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5287 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5288 there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5290 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5291 default. Here are some of these default settings:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5293 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5294 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5295 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5296 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5297 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5299 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5300 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5302 ** CC mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5304 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5305 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5306 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5307 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5308 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5309 loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5311 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5312 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5313 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5314 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5315 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5316 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5318 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5319 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5321 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5322 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5323 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5325 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5326 style that the Python developers like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5328 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5329 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5330 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5332 ** VC Changes [new]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5334 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5335 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5336 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5338 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5339 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5340 developers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5342 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5343 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5345 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5346 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5347 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5348 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5350 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5351 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5353 ** Calendar changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5355 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5356 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5357 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5359 ** ps-print changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5360
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5361 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5363 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5365 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5366 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5367 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5368 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5369 It defaults to `letter'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5370 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5372 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5373 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5374 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5376 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5377 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5378 It defaults to 1.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5379
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5380 *** Horizontal layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5382 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5383 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5384 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5385
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5386 *** Vertical layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5388 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5389 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5390 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5391
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5392 *** Headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5394 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5395 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5396 margin above the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5397
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5398 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5399 framing box is printed around the header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5401 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5402 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5403
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5404 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5405 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5406 `ps-header-font-size'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5407
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5408 *** Font managing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5410 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5411 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5412 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5413 elements to this alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5414
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5415 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5416 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5418 ** hideshow changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5419
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5420 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5421 C++, ; for lisp).
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5423 *** Support for java-mode added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5425 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5426 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5428 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5429 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5430 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5432 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5433 robust and a lot faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5434
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5435 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5436
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5437 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5438 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5439 documentation for more details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5440
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5441 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5443 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5444 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5445 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5446 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5447 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5449 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5450 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5451 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5452 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5453
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5454 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5456 *** Custom support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5458 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5459 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5460 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5461 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5462 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5463 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5465 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5467 *** Maximum decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5469 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5470 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5471 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5472 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5473 to get the old behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5474
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5475 *** New support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5477 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5479 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5480 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5482 *** Configurable support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5484 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5485 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5486 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5487 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5488 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5489 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5490 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5492 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5493 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5494 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5496 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5498 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5499 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5500 for any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5502 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5504 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5506 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5507
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5508 *** New faces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5510 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5511 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5512 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5513 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5515 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5517 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5518 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5519 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5521 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5523 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5524 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5525 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5526 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5527 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5528 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5529 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5531 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5532 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5533 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5534 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5535 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5536 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5538 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5539
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5540 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5541 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5542 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5543 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5545 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5546 settings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5548 ** Ada mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5550 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5551 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5552 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5553 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5554 stubs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5556 *** There are two new commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5557 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5558 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5560 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5561 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5562 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5564 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5565 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5566 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5568 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5569 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5570 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5571 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5572
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5573 ** Scheme mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5575 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5576 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5577 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5578 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5579 have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5581 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5582 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5583 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5584 variables as buffer-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5586 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5587 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5588
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5589 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5590
27475
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5591 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5592 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5593 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5594 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5595
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5596 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5597 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5598 buffer in Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5599
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5600 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5601 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5602 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5603 option takes precedence.
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5604
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5605 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5606 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5607 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5609 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5610 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5611 the current defun.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5613 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5614 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5615
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5616 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5617 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5618 necessary).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5620 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5621 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5622 these register values no longer become completely useless.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5623 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5624 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5625 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5627 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5628 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5629 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5630 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5632 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5633 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5634 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5635 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5636 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5638 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5639 since it applies only to the current frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5641 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5642 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5643 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5645 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5646 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5647 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5648 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5649 instead of just the file you are editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5651 ** RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5653 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5654 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5655 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5656 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5657 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5658
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5659 C-c ( reftex-label
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5660 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5661 knows which kind of label is needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5663 C-c ) reftex-reference
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5664 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5665 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5667 C-c [ reftex-citation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5668 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5669 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5671 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5672 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5674 C-c = reftex-toc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5675 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5676 can quickly jump to every section.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5677
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5678 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5679 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5680 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5681 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5682 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5683
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5684 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5686 *** Info documentation is now available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5688 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5689 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5691 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5692 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5694 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5695 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5696
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5697 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5698 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5699 appropriate functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5701 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5702 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5704 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5705 been cleaned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5707 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5708 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5710 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5711 shall be delimited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5713 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5714 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5715 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5717 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5718 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5719 prefixed with `ALT'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5720
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5721 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5722 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5723 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5724 documentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5725
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5726 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5727 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5728 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5730 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5731 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5733 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5734 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5735 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5737 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5739 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5741 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5742 from alien sources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5743
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5744 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5745 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5746 crossref entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5747
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5748 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5749 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5751 *** Added support for imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5752
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5753 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5754 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5755 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5756 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5758 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5759 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5761 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5762
27136
a0288373f30a Correct typos.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27112
diff changeset
5763 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
27112
82ad511a02f6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27094
diff changeset
5764
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5765 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5766 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5767 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5768 as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5769
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5770 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5771 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5773 ** browse-url changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5775 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5776 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5777 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5778 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5779 customization variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5781 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5783 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5784 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5785 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5786
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5787 ** Changes in Ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5788
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5789 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5790 pops up the Info file for this command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5792 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5793 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5794 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5795 directories).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5797 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5798 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5799 files in the same directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5801 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5802 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5803 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5804
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5805 ** Changes in Viper
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5807 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5808 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5809 instead of vip-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5810 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5811 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5812 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5813 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5814 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5815 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5816 color when Viper is in insert state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5817 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5818 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5819 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5820
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5821 ** Etags changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5823 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5824 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5825 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5826 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5827 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5829 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5831 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5832 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5834 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5835 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5836 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5838 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5839 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5840 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5841 methods and protocols.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5843 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5844 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5845 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5846 paragraph name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5848 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5849 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5850 at least M times and as many as N times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5852 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5853 in files has changed slightly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5855 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5856 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5857 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5858 with old time-stamp-format values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5860 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5861 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5862 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5863 reasons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5864
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5865 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5866 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5867 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5868 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5869 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5870 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5872 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5873 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5874 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5875
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5876 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5877 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5878 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5879 recommended now will continue to work then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5881 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5882 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5884 ** There are some additional major modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5886 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5887 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5888 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5889
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5890 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5891 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5892 into Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5894 ** New Lisp packages include:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5896 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5898 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5899 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5901 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5902
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5903 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5904 in shell buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5905
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5906 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5907 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5908 and `elint-defun'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5909
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5910 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5911 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5912 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5913 strings or comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5914
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5915 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5916 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5917 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5918 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5919 at these points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5921 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5922 can visit them by short forms of their names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5924 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5925 Emacs Lisp function at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5927 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5929 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5930 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5931
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5932 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5934 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5936 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5938 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5939 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5941 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5942 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5943 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5944 original place after inserting the copy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5946 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5947 on the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5949 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5950 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5951 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5953 Enable mouse-drag with:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5954 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5955 -or-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5956 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5958 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5959 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5961 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5962 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5963
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5964 *** ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5966 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5967 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5968 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5969 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5970 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5971 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5972 instance) and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5974 To use this package load it using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5975 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5976 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5977 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5978 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5979 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5980 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5981
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5982 *** Interface to ph.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5984 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5986 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5987 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5988 these servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5990 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5992 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5993 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5994 while the real cursor does not move.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5996 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5997 for visiting your favorite web sites.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5999 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6000 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6002 ** movemail change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6004 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6005 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6006 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6007 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6009 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6010
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6011 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6013 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6015 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6016 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6017 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6018 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6019 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6021 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6022 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6023 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6024 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6025 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6026 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6027
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6028 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6030 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6031 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6032 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6033 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6035 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6036 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6037
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6038 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6039 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6040 "win".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6041
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6042 ** Basic Lisp changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6044 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6045 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6047 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6048 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6049 or by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6051 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6052
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6053 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6054
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6055 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6056 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6058 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6059 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6060 its argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6061
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6062 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6063
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6064 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6066 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6068 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6069 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6070 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6071 `format' function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6073 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6074 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6075 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6076
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6077 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6078 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6079 adding one of these suffixes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6081 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6082 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6083 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6085 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6086 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6088 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6090 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6091 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6093 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6094 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6095
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6096 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6098 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6099 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6100
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6101 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6102 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6103 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6104 works using `save-current-buffer'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6106 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6107 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6108 of the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6109
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6110 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6111 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6112 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6113 as the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6115 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6116 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6117 matches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6119 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6121 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6122 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6123 Then it returns that string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6125 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6127 (with-output-to-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6128 (princ "The buffer is ")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6129 (princ (buffer-name)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6130
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6131 returns "The buffer is foo".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6133 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6134 is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6135
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6136 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6137 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6138 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6140 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6141 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6143 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6144 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6145 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6146 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6147 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6148 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6150 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6151 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6152 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6153 characters".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6155 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6156 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6157 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6158 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6159 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6161 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6162 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6163 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6164 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6166 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6167 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6169 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6170
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6171 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6172 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6173 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6174 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6175 guaranteed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6177 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6178 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6179 character).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6181 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6183 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6184 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6185 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6186 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6187 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6189 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6191 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6192 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6193 more than the number of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6195 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6196 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6197 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6198 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6199 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6200 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6202 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6203 and returns a string containing those characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6205 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6206 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6207 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6208 character, sref signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6210 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6211 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6212 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6213
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6214 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6215 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6216 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6218 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6219 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6220 to a vector of the characters in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6221
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6222 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6223 of a string. You call it as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6225 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6227 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6228 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6229 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6230 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6231 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6233 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6234 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6236 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6237 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6239 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6240 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6241 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6242 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6244 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6246 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6248 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6249 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6250 are not included in the resulting value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6252 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6253 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6254 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6255 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6257 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6258 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6259 character extends across that column), then the padding character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6260 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6261 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6262 column START-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6264 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6265 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6266 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6267 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6268 changed text, before the change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6270 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6271 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6272 one character set for each script, not for each language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6274 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6275
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6276 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6278 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6279 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6281 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6282 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6283 which identify the character within that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6285 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6286 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6287 opposite of split-char.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6289 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6290 of all the characters between BEG and END.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6292 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6293 of all the characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6295 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6296 and specifying coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6298 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6299 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6300 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6301 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6302 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6303 as what to do about code conversion.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6305 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6306 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6308 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6309 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6310 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6312 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6313 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6314 to match against a file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6316 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6317 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6318 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6319 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6320 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6321 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6323 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6324 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6326 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6327 the coding system to use for network sockets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6329 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6330 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6331 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6332 service names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6334 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6335 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6336 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6337 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6338 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6339 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6341 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6342 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6344 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6345 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6346 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6347 start the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6349 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6350 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6351 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6352 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6353 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6355 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6356 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6357 subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6359 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6360 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6361 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6362 connection permanently or until overridden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6364 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6365 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6366 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6367 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6368 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6369 system for one operation at a time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6371 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6372 files, subprocesses or network connections.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6374 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6375 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6376 The value is a cons cell,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6377 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6378 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6379 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6380 input to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6382 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6383 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6385 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6386 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6387 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6389 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6390 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6391 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6392 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6393 customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6395 Thus, instead of writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6397 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6398 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6400 you would now write this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6402 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6403 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6404 :type 'boolean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6405 :group foo)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6407 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6408 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6409 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6410 for a description of them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6412 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6413 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6415 (defgroup ispell nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6416 "Spell checking using Ispell."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6417 :group 'processes)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6419 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6420 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6421 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6422 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6423 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6425 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6426 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6427 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6428 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6429 first-level subgroups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6431 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6432
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6433 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6434 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6436 ** easy-mmode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6438 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6439 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6440 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6441 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6442 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6443 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6445 ** Text property changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6447 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6448 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6450 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6451 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6452 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6453 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6454 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6456 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6457 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6458 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6459 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6461 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6462 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6463 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6465 ** Changes in invisibility features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6467 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6468 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6469 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6470 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6471 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6472 make the overlay visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6474 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6475 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6476 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6477 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6478 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6479 t when it should hide it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6480
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6481 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6483 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6484 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6485 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6486 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6487 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6488 Here is an example of how to do this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6490 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6491 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6492 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6493 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6495 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6496 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6497
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6498 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6499 ;; When done with the overlays:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6500 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6501 ;; Or respectively:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6502 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6504 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6505
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6506 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6507 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6508 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6509 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6511 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6512 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6513 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6515 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6516 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6517
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6518 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6519 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6521 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6522 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6523 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6525 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6526 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6527 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6528 determine the syntax type of the character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6530 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6531 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6533 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6534 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6535 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6537 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6538 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6539 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6540 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6541 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6543 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6544 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6545
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6546 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6547 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6548 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6550 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6551 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6552 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6553 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6554 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6556 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6557 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6558 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6560 ** Changes in face features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6561
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6562 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6563 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6565 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6566 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6568 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6569 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6570
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6571 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6572 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6574 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6575 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6576 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6577 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6578 overlay property).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6579
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6580 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6581 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6583 ** Changes in file-handling functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6585 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6586 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6587 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6588 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6590 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6591 begins with ~.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6592
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6593 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6594 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6596 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6597 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6598
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6599 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6600 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6602 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6603 character code conversion as well as other things.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6604
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6605 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6606 (formerly it did not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6608 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6609 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6611 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6612 instead of constant strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6614 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6615 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6616 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6618 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6619 in the same way as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6621 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6622 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6623 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6625 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6626 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6627 else, and returns nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6629 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6630 directory cannot be listed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6632 ** Changes in minibuffer input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6634 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6635 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6636 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6637 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6638 ways:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6640 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6641 It is available through the history command M-n.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6642
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6643 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6644 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6645 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6646 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6647 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6648
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6649 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6650 argument in this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6652 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6653 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6654 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6656 ** Echo area features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6657
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6658 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6659 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6660 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6661 after the echo area is cleared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6663 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6664 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6666 ** Keyboard input features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6668 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6669 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6671 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6672 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6673 by keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6675 ** Frame-related changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6676
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6677 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6678 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6679 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6681 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6682 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6683 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6685 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6686 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6687 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6688 in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6690 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6691 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6692 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6694 ** X Windows features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6696 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6697 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6698 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6699
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6700 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6701 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6702
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6703 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6704 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6705 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6706
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6707 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6708 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6710 ** Subprocess features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6712 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6713 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6714 automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6716 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6717 and returns the output from the command as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6719 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6720 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6722 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6723 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6725 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6726 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6727 goes after the other menu items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6729 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6730 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6731 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6732 are in use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6734 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6735 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6737 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6738 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6739 form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6741 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6742 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6743 but its hook is still run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6744
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6745 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6746 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6747
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6748 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6749 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6750 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6752 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6753 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6754 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6755 warned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6756
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6757 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6758 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6759
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6760 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6761 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6762 functions like display-time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6763
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6764 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6765 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6767 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6768 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6769 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6771 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6772 if there is an error in compilation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6774 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6775 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6776 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6777 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6778
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6779 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6780 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6781 the *scratch* buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6782
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6783 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6784 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6785 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6786 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6788 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6789 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6790 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6792 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6793 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6794 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6795 and compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6797 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6798 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6799 full name of the specified user will be returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6801 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6802 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6803 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6804 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6805 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6806 files at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6807
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6808 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6809 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6810 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6811 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6813 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6814 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6815 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6816 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6817
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6818 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6820 ** imenu.el changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6821
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6822 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6823 item from menu created by imenu.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6825 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6826 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6827 select one of those items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6829 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6830
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6831 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6832
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6833 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6834 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6835
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6836 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6837 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6838 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6839
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6840 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6841
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6842 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6843 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6845 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6846 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6847 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6848 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6849 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6850 all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6852 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6853 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6855 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6856 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6857 as in previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6859 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6860 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6861 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6862 frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6863
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6864 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6865 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6866 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6867 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6868 accident.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6870 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6871 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6872 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6873 line and then executing the macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6875 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6876
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6877 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6878 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6879 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6880 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6881
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6882 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6884 *** Font Lock support modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6886 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6887 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6888 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6889 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6890 Font Lock mode is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6892 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6893
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6894 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6896 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6898 *** lazy-lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6900 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6901 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6902 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6903 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6904 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6905 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6906 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6908 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6909
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6910 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6911
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6912 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6913
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6914 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6915
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6916 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6917 paren and key.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6918
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6919 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6920 supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6922 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6924 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6925 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6926 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6927 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6929 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6930 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6931
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6932 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6933 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6934 obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6936 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6937 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6938
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6939 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6941 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6943 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6945 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6946 referred.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6948 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6949
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6950 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6952 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6953
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6954 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6956 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6957 buffers.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6958
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6959 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6960
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6961 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6963 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6965 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6967 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6968
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6969 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6970
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6971 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6972
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6973 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6974 is possible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6976 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6977
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6978 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6979 groups of groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6981 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6982
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6983 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6984 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6986 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6988 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6990 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6992 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6994 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6995 expiration times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6996
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6997 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6999 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7000 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7002 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7003 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7004 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7006 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7007 articles with the `*' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7009 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7010
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7011 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7013 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7015 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7016
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7017 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7018 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7020 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7021 buffer.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7022
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7023 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7024
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7025 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7027 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7029 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7030
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7031 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7032
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7033 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7034
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7035 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7037 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7038
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7039 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7040
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7041 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7042 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7044 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7045 refetching.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7047 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7049 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7050 buffer to allow easier treatment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7052 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7054 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7056 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7058 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7059 articles.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7061 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7062
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7063 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7064
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7065 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7066 cited text to hide is now customizable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7068 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7070 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7072 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7074 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7076 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7078 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7079 in greater detail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7081 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7082
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7083 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7084 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7085 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7086 exists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7088 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7089 as well as lists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7090
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7091 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7092 of a given keymap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7094 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7095 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7096 keymap or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7098 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7099 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7100 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7101 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7102 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7103 alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7105 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7106
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7107 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7109 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7110 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7111 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7112 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7113 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7115 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7116 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7117 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7119 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7121 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7122 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7123 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7124 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7125 chapter of the manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7127 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7128 customization variables take effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7130 ** Marking with the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7132 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7133 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7134 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7135
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7136 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7138 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7140 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7141 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7143 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7144 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7145 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7146 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7147 applications, these problems are significant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7149 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7150 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7151 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7152 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7153 other DOS application as a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7155 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7156 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7158 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7159 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7160 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7161 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7162 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7163 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7165 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7167 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7168 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7169 minibuffer contains.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7171 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7173 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7174 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7175 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7176 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7178 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7179 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7180 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7181 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7183 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7184 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7186 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7187 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7188 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7190 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7191 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7192 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7193 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7195 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7196
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7197 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7198 to replace the characters it "deletes".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7199
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7200 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7202 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7203 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7204 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7205 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7206 immediately after the selected one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7208 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7209 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7211 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7213 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7214 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7215 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7216 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7217 recover-session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7219 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7220 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7221 will not work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7223 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7224 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7225 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7226 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7227 now that the bug is fixed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7228
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7229 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7231 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7232 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7233 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7234 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7236 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7237 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7238 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7239 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7240
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7241 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7242 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7243 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7245 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7246 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7247 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7248 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7249 remain normal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7251 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7252 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7253
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7254 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7255 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7256 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7257 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7259 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7260 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7261 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7262 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7263 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7264 `mail-directory-stream'.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7266 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7267 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7268 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7269 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7271 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7272 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7273 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7275 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7276 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7277 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7278 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7279 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7280 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7281 to a limitation in font-lock).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7283 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7285 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7286 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7287 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7288 this example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7290 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7291 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7293 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7295 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7297 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7299 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7300
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7301 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7302 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7303 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7304 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7305 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7306 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7308 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7309 does the same job.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7311 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7312 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7314 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7315 text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7317 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7319 *** Global Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7321 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7322 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7323 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7324 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7325 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7327 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7329 (global-font-lock-mode t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7331 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7333 *** Local Refontification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7334
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7335 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7336 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7337 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7338 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7340 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7341 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7342 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7343 above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7345 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7347 ** Follow mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7349 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7350 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7351 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7352 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7353 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7354 follow-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7356 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7358 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7359 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7361 ** hide-show changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7363 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7364 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7365 normal hooks.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7367 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7368 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7370 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7371 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7372 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7374 ** MSDOS Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7376 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7377 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7379 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7380 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7382 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7384 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7385 pressing both mouse buttons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7386
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7387 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7388 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7389 are:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7390
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7391 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7392 now works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7394 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7395
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7396 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7397 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7399 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7401 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7402
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7403 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7405 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7407 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7409 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7411 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7412 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7413 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7414 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7415 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7417 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7419 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7420 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7421 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7422 be different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7423
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7424 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7425 than `system-type'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7427 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7429 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7430 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7432 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7433 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7434
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7435 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7436 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7437 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7439 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7440 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7441 like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7443 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7445 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7446 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7447 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7449 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7450 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7451 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7453 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7454 up if too much time passes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7456 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7458 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7459 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7460 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7461 form in BODY.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7463 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7464 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7465 call looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7467 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7469 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7470 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7471 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7472 ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7474 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7475 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7476 command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7477
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7478 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7479 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7480 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7481 each time Emacs becomes idle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7483 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7484 idle for SECS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7486 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7487 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7488 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7489 instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7491 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7492 there is no answer within a certain time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7494 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7496 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7497 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7498 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7500 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7501 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7502 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7503 arguments in between are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7505 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7506 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7507
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7508 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7509 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7510 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7511 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7512 version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7513
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7514 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7515 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7516 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7517 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7518 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7519 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7521 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7522 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7523 systems with limited file name syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7525 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7526 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7527 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7528 completions.el:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7530 (defvar save-completions-file-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7531 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7532 "*The filename to save completions to.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7534 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7535 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7536 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7537 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7538 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7539
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7540 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7541 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7542 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7544 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7545 marker from its buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7546
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7547 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7548 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7549 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7551 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7552 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7553 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7554 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7555 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7556 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7558 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7559 errors that happen often during editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7561 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7562 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7563 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7565 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7566 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7568 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7569 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7570 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7571 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7572 and not get-buffer-window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7574 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7575 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7576 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7578 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7579 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7580 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7581 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7582 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7583 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7584 over and over for the same text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7586 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7587
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7588 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7589 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7590
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7591 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7592 ;; $HEADER: text $
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7594 in addition to the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7596 ;; HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7598 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7599 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7600 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7602 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7604 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7605 Copyright information:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7606
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
7607 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7608
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7609 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7610 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7611 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7612 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7614 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7615 of this document, or of portions of it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7616 under the above conditions, provided also that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7617 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7618
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7619 Local variables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7620 mode: outline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7621 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7622 end: